618834
7
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/248
Pagina verder
Owner's Manual for
Vehicle
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Contents
A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
3 Series
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English X/13, 11 13 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Addendum
ADDENDUM TO BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN
OWNERS MANUAL 1402926810
We wanted to provide you with some
updates and clarifications with respect to
the printed BMW Owner’s Manual.
These updates and clarifications will
supersede the materials contained in
that document.
1. Where the terms “service center,”
“the service center,” “your service
center,” “service specialist,’ or
“service” are used in the Owner’s
Manual, we wanted to clarify that
the terms refer to a BMW dealer’s
service center or another service
center or repair shop that employs
trained personnel that can perform
maintenance and repair work on
your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications.
2. Where the text of the Owner’s
Manual contains an affirmative
instruction to contact a “service
center” or “your service center,” we
wanted to clarify that BMW
recommends that, if you are faced
with one of the situations addressed
by that text, you contact or seek the
assistance of a BMW dealer’s
service center or another service
center or repair shop that employs
trained personnel that can perform
maintenance and repair work on
your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications.
While BMW of North America LLC,
at no cost to you, will pay for repairs
required by the limited warranties
provided with respect to your
vehicle and for maintenance under
the Maintenance Program during
the applicable warranty and
maintenance coverage periods, you
are free to elect, both during those
periods and thereafter, to have
maintenance and repair work
provided by other service centers or
repair shops.
3. Where the Owner’s Manual makes
reference to parts and accessories
having been approved by BMW,
those references are intended to
reflect that those parts and
accessories are recommended by
BMW of North America LLC. You
may elect to use other parts and
accessories, but, if you do, we
recommend that you make sure that
any such parts and/or accessories
are appropriate for use on your
vehicle.
4. At page 7, under the warranty
section’s discussion of
homologation, where it states that
you “cannot lodge warranty claims
for your vehicle there,” the text
should read that you “may not be
able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there.”
5. At page 7, under the “Parts and
Accessories” section, in the fifth
sentence, the word “cannot” should
read “does not.”
6. At page 53, in the “Checking and
replacing safety belts” section, the
Addendum
text beginning, “Have the work
performed only by your service
center . . .” should be disregarded
and the following text should be
read in lieu thereof: “BMW
recommends having this work
performed by a service center as it
is important that this safety feature
functions properly.”
7. At page 90, under the heading:
“Special windshield,” the paragraph
beginning, “Therefore have the
special windshield . . .” should be
disregarded and the following text
should be read in lieu thereof:
“BMW recommends that you have
the special windshield replaced by
the service center.”
8. At page 168 under the heading:
“Objects within the range of
movement of the pedals” and at
page 226 under the heading:
“Carpets and floor mats,” the
paragraph that begins: “Only use
floor mats . . .” should be
disregarded and the following
language should be read in lieu
thereof: “The manufacturer of your
vehicle recommends that you use
floor mats that have been identified
by it as appropriate for use in your
vehicle and that can be properly
fixed in place.”
9. At page 195, under the heading:
“Mounting,” the paragraph
beginning, “Have mounting and
balancing . . .” should be
disregarded and the following text
should be read in lieu thereof:
“BMW recommends that you have
mounting and balancing performed
by your service center or a tire
mounting specialist.”
10. At page 196, under the heading:
“Approved wheels and tires,” the
term “Approved” should be
disregarded and in lieu thereof, the
term “Recommended” should be
read in its place. In addition, the
text of that section should be
disregarded and the following text
should be read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle
strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer for your vehicle type;
otherwise, for example, despite
having the same official size ratings,
variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe
accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle
does not evaluate non-
recommended wheels and tires to
determine if they are suitable for
use on your vehicle.
11. At page 197, under the heading:
“Snow Chains,” the text should be
disregarded and the following text
should be read in lieu thereof:
Only certain types of fine-link snow
chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of your vehicle and
are determined by the manufacturer
of your vehicle to be road safe and
are recommended by the
manufacturer of your vehicle.
Addendum
Information about recommended
snow chains is available from a
service center.
12. At page 199, under the heading
“Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If
you are unfamiliar” should be
disregarded.
13. At page 202, under the heading:
“Approved oil types,” the references
to “Approved” should be read as
“Suitable.” Immediately preceding
the “Gasoline engine” chart, the
following sentence should be
inserted: “Add engine oils that meet
the following oil rating
standards: . . .”
14. At page 202, under the heading:
“Alternative oil types,” the text
preceding the chart should be
disregarded, and in lieu thereof
should be read as follows: “If an
engine oil suitable for continuous
use is not available, up to 1 US
quart/liter of an engine oil with the
following oil rating can be
added: . . .” The reference to
“specification” should be read as
“rating.”
15. At page 202, under the heading:
“Engine oil change,” the text should
be disregarded and in lieu thereof
should be read as follows:
BMW recommends that you have
the oil changed at your BMW
dealer’s service center or at another
service center that has trained
personnel that can perform the work
in accordance with BMW
specifications.
16. At page 204, under the heading:
“Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models,” the
second paragraph should be
disregarded and the following text
read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that you have
maintenance and repair performed
by your BMW dealer’s service
center or another service center or
repair shop that employs trained
personnel that can perform
maintenance and repair work on
your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications. The
manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that you maintain
records of all maintenance and
repair work performed on your
vehicle.
17. At page 207 and page 210, where it
reads: “Do not perform work/bulb
replacement on xenon headlamps,”
that text should be disregarded and
in lieu thereof the following text
should be read: “Xenon headlamp
work or replacement can cause
serious and fatal injuries.” In the
text that follows, where it reads:
“[h]ave any work on the xenon
lighting system . . . ,” the following
words should be read as preceding
that passage: “It is strongly
suggested that you . . . .”
18. At page 215, under the “Battery
replacement” section, the text
should be disregarded and in lieu
Addendum
thereof the following text should be
read:
Use of recommended vehicle
batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that you use vehicle
batteries that it has tested and
recommends for use in your vehicle;
otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions
may not be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the
manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that you have the
battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all
comfort functions are fully available,
and that any “check control”
messages of these comfort
functions are no longer displayed.
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 234.
6 Notes
At a glance
14 Cockpit
18 iDrive
26 Voice activation system
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
34 Opening and closing
49 Adjusting
59 Transporting children safely
63 Driving
75 Displays
91 Lamps
96 Safety
116 Driving stability control systems
121 Driving comfort
144 Climate control
151 Interior equipment
159 Storage compartments
Driving tips
166 Things to remember when driving
169 Loading
172 Saving fuel
Mobility
180 Refueling
182 Fuel
187 Wheels and tires
198 Engine compartment
200 Engine oil
203 Coolant
204 Maintenance
206 Replacing components
217 Breakdown assistance
223 Care
Reference
230 Technical data
234 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included
with the onboard literature.
Additional sources of information
The service center will be happy to answer any
other questions you may have.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐
hicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment
is also described and illustrated that is not
available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the
selected optional equipment or the country-
specific variants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
For your own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery -
homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated
in a different country it might be necessary to
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐
ating conditions and permit requirements. If
your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐
gation requirements in a certain country you
cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle
there. Further information can be obtained
from your Service Centre.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair
methods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
BMW recommends using parts and
accessories approved by BMW for this
purpose.
Your BMW center is the right contact for
genuine BMW parts and accessories, other
products approved by BMW and related
qualified advice.
BMW has tested these products for safety and
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
BMW can assume responsibility for them.
However, we cannot assume any responsibility
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
not been specifically approved by BMW.
BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard. This guarantee is also not
applicable when country-specific government
approval has been granted. Testing of this kind
may fail to embrace the entire range of
potential operating conditions to which
components might be exposed on BMW
vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail
to comply with BMW's own stringent quality
standards.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
BMW Maintenance system
Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
documents the state of a component, a mod‐
ule, a system or the environment:
Operating states of system components,
fill levels for instance.
Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐
gagement of stability control systems.
Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐
nostic tools. You can obtain further information
there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected,
the information in the fault memory is deleted
or overwritten on a continuous basis.
When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐
ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐
ciate this technical data with individuals if it is
combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐
dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐
ness accounts — possibly with the assistance
of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 10
Notes
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Seite 11
Notes
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblinds  47
2 Rear window safety switch  46
3 Power windows  45
4 Exterior mirror operation  56
5 Glove compartment on the driver's
side  159
Driver assistance systems
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion  114
Intelligent Safety  104
Collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function  105.
Lane departure warning  112
6 Lamps
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Front fog lamps  94
Parking lamps  91
Low beams  91
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol  92
Daytime running lights  92
Adaptive Light Control  92
High-beam Assistant  93
Instrument lighting  94
7 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal  68
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher  68
High-beam Assistant  93
Roadside parking lamps  92
Computer  86
8 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed  128,  121
Resume speed  129,  121
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing  128
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupting  121
Reduce distance  124
Increase distance  124
Cruise control rocker switch  129,  123
9 Instrument cluster  75
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation  26
Telephone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
Thumbwheel for selection lists  85
11 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers  68
Rain sensor  69
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps  70
12 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off  64
Auto Start/Stop function  65
13 Horn
14 Steering wheel heating  58
15 Adjust steering wheel  58
16 Unlock hood  199
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
All around the center console
1 Headliner  17
2 Control Display  18
3 Ventilation  149
4 Hazard warning system  217
Central locking system  37
5 Glove compartment  159
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication
7 Climate control  144
8 Controller with buttons  18
9 Parking brake  67
10 PDC Park Distance Control  130
Rearview camera  133
Parking assistant  138
Surround View  132
11 Driving Dynamics Control  118
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol  116
12 Automatic transmission selector
lever  71
Manual transmission selector lever  71
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
All around the headliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest  217
2 Glass sunroof, powered  47
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger
airbag  98
4 Reading lamps  94
5 Interior lamps  94
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
Hints
To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller with navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
1. Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐
ton
Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
Press the but‐
ton
Function
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐
ton
Function
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last lis‐
tened to, switch between au‐
dio menus.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
ous display.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
1.
"Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
"Speller": enter letters and numbers.
"Interactive map": operating the inter‐
active map.
"Browser": enter Internet addresses.
"Audio feedback": the entered letters
and numbers are announced.
Entering letters and numbers
The entry of the letters requires some practice
at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to
the following:
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
For the input of upper/lower case letters
and numbers, it may be necessary to
switch via the controller to the correspond‐
ing Input mode, refer to page 25, e.g.
when the spelling of upper and lower case
letters is identical.
Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
Always enter accompanying signs, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The possibility of input
depends on the set language. Where nec‐
essary, enter special characters via the
controller.
To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
To enter an underscore, slide to the right in
the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet
The interactive map in the navigation system
and Internet sites can be moved via the touch‐
pad.
Function Controls
Move interactive map
or Internet sites.
Slide in the corre‐
sponding direction.
Enlarge/shrink interac‐
tive map or Internet
sites.
Drag inwards or
outwards on the
touchpad with the
fingers.
Display the menu or
open a link in the Inter‐
net.
Tap once.
Changing settings
Settings on the control display, such as the
volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do
this slide to the left or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
Time.
Current entertainment source.
Sound output, on/off.
Wireless network reception strength.
Telephone status.
Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched
off.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Without navigation system and
telephone
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication.
Saving a function
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
To display short information: touch the
button.
To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
Only those letters are offered during the
entry for which data is available.
Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated by spoken
commands via the voice activation system.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries.
Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated
using the voice activation system.
The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 88.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function in this case via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›End‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Short commands exist for many functions.
Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can
also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they
are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
Seite 26
At a glance Voice activation system
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, nearly
irrespective of which menu item is currently
selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are an‐
nounced.
›Help voice activation‹: information about
the principle of operation for the voice acti‐
vation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media menu‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹
5. ›C D drive‹
6. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Via short command
Playback of the CD can also be started via a
short command.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
announcements from the system are issued in
an abbreviated form.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
struction until the desired volume is set.
The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Hints on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 217, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located in the Quick Reference is important
information for the operation of the vehicle, the
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1.
Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
"Quick reference"
"Search by pictures"
"Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Seite 29
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1.
Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press the button again to return to
the function displayed last.
5.
Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐
file, refer to page 35.
Information on the required maintenance is
stored in the remote control as well. Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 204
At a glance
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Panic mode in alarm system
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote
control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
Driver's door.
Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
The front passenger glove compartment con‐
tains a switch for separately securing the trunk
lid, refer to page 41.
Replacing the battery
1.
Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from the
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote
control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources.
Discharged battery in the remote control.
Interference of radio transmission by mo‐
bile devices in close proximity to the re‐
mote control.
Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency
detection of the remote control
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding
Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
pressing the brake.
Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
Control message appears, hold the remote
control, as shown, against the marked area on
the steering column and press the Start/Stop
button within 10 seconds while pressing the
clutch pedal.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
file is called up.
Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three
Personal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you
to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function. Additional information is avail‐
able from the service center.
The settings are transmitted as follows:
Via the USB interface for data transfer.
BMW Online.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the
one associated with the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
Called up profile is assigned to the remote
control being used at the time.
Renaming profiles
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the
saved contacts can be exported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop for example.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individ‐
ual settings without affecting the three Per‐
sonal Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Guest".
4. Adjust the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
Collision warning: warning time.
Exterior mirror position.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to
last.
Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings.
Driving Dynamics Control: sport program
Driver's seat position: automatically re‐
trieved after unlocking.
Programmable memory buttons: assign‐
ment.
Head-up Display: selection, brightness,
position and rotation of the display.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐
ting.
Tone: tone settings.
Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐
mate control with enhanced features: set‐
tings.
Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
output on/off.
Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
signal tone volume.
Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings.
Rearview camera: selection of functions
and type of display.
Side View: selection of the display type.
Language on the Control Display.
Lane departure warning: last setting, on/
off.
Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,
on/off.
Daytime running lights: current setting.
Triple turn signal activation.
Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or
after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
Doors.
Trunk lid.
Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
Via the remote control.
Via the door handles of the driver's and
front passenger doors.
The following takes place simultaneously
when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
mote control:
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
the theft protection is activated/deacti‐
vated. Theft protection prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock but‐
tons or the door opener.
The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Opening and closing: from
the outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy
lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Create the settings, refer to page 43.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows and the glass sunroof open.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds of when the vehicle was locked Interior
motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
theft warning system, refer to page 45, are
switched off. After locking, wait 10 seconds
before interior lamps and courtesy lamps are
switched on.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Opening the trunk lid
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
trol if the vehicle has been unlocked.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery
may be discharged or there may be interfer‐
ence from external sources such as mobile
phones, metal objects, overhead power lines,
transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at
the door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S.
LX8766E.
LX8CAS.
LX8CAS2.
MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
the remote control.
Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via
the door lock.
Locking the doors and trunk lid at
once
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
1.
With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
ing the button for the central locking sys‐
tem in the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐
lock the vehicle using the integrated key via
the door lock on the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from
the inside
Locking and unlocking
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the
doors and the trunk lid when the front doors
are closed, but they are not secured against
theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the arm‐
rest or
Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Trunk lid
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
Press the button on the trunk lid.
Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens
with no-touch activation, refer to
page 42.
Opening from the inside
Push the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
it is not locked.
Closing
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the
switch in the front passenger glove compart‐
ment.
Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system.
If the glove compartment on the front passen‐
ger side is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using valet service. The infrared remote con‐
trol can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
Convenient closing.
Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.
Start the engine.
Functional requirements
There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons of the remote control or Comfort
Access.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof are closed.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
ton on the remote control.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Opening trunk lid with no-touch
activation
With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be
opened with no-touch activation using the re‐
mote control you are carrying.
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
motion in the center of the area at the rear of
the car and the trunk lid opens.
Foot movement to be carried out
Do not touch vehicle
With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
hot exhaust system parts.◀
1.
Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about arm's length from the trunk lid.
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
leg must pass through the ranges of both
sensors.
Opening
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
Preventing inadvertent opening
In situations where the trunk lid should is
not to be opened with no-touch activation, en‐
sure that the remote control is located beyond
the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m
from the rear of the car.
Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐
vertently, for example by an unintentional or
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sour‐
ces such as mobile phones, metal objects,
overhead power lines, transmission towers,
etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with
the remote control button or with the button on
the trunk lid.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
"Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
"All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or
the country-specific variant, you can set
whether the doors are also unlocked with the
button on the remote control.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
"Flash when lock/unlock"
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
"Lock if no door is opened"
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
"Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐
jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
When a seat position switch is pressed.
When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk
lid.
Movements in the vehicle.
Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car.
Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
By sounding an acoustic alarm.
By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
By flashing the daytime running lights.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
cess at the door lock, the alarm system is
armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
the remote control.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with
no-touch activation, refer to page 42.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again if the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off the alarm
To terminate the alarm:
Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol.
With Comfort Access: If you are carrying
the remote control with you, grasp the
driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
In automatic car washes.
In duplex garages.
During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
jure themselves.◀
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Opening
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening, refer to page 38, via the
remote control.
Closing
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the
range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from
opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
Switching on and off
Press the button.
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transport‐
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐
vision.◀
Roller sunblinds
Roller sunblind for rear window
General information
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
be moved at low interior temperatures.
Extending or retracting roller blind for
rear window
Press the button.
Roller sunblinds for the rear side
windows
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
it onto the bracket.
Do not open the window while the roller
sunblind is raised.
Do not open the window while the roller sun‐
blind is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of
damage at high speeds that may result in per‐
sonal injury.◀
Glass sunroof, powered
General information
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
selves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch upward briefly.
Closed roof is tilted open.
The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The
sliding visor stays com‐
pletely open.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Slide switch back to the re‐
sistance point and hold.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together as long as
the switch is held down.
Press switch back past the resistance
point.
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically. Pressing the switch again
stops the opening motion.
Analogously, the glass sunroof is closed by
sliding the switch forward.
The sliding visor remains open and can be
closed by hand.
Convenient operation, refer to page 38, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 42, with
Comfort Access.
Comfort position
Stops the roof in the comfort position if the
roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise
in the passenger compartment.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,
the closing action may not be interrupted in
certain extreme situations, such as when thin
objects are present.◀
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection. Make sure
that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the roof can only be operated
to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without
pinch protection.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the sunroof is
completely closed.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
Safety belts, refer to page 52.
Head restraints, refer to page 53.
Airbags, refer to page 96.
Seats
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline
the backrest on the front passenger side too
far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an
accident. This would eliminate the protection
normally provided by the belt.◀
Manually adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly to make sure it engages
properly.
Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the remote control currently in use. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
function, refer to page 44, is activated for this
purpose.
Adjustments in detail
1.
Forward/back.
Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
2. Height.
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Number of safety belts
Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety
belts for the safety of you and your passen‐
gers. However, they can only offer protection
when adjusted correctly.
Hints
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
To protect the occupants, the belt locking trig‐
gers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the
holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
The center rear seat belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
impact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable
objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull
the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the
tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;
otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the
restraining effect reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Head restraints in the front
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Adjusting the height
To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Tilt
Three different tilt positions are available.
Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐
straint forward, arrow 1.
Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head
restraint folds as far back as possible.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Adjusting the height
To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
The center head restraint cannot be adjusted
in elevation.
Folding down head restraints
Extending/retracting head restraint
Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐
sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted
headrests again if passengers are being car‐
ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀
To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Seat and mirror memory
Hints
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat could result in an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed
When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged.◀
Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
General information
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions can be stored and retrieved for each
remote control. Settings for the backrest width
and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1.
Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored
seat positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
Open and close the door or trunk lid.
Press a button on the remote control.
Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀
Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
mirror setting is stored for the remote control
in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if the setting for this function is active.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 55
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
In car washes.
In narrow streets.
For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐
terior rear view mirror, refer to page 58.
Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Interior rearview mirror, manually
dimmable
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
In the mirror glass.
On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
Keep the photocells clean.
Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐
vided in accordance with the age, weight and
size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to
their age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger
seat, make sure that the front, knee and side
airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐
vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 98.
Note
Deactivated front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint
fixing systems
Before mounting
Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Hints
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before installation of child restraint sys‐
tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest
tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against
the backrest and securely latch all backrests.
Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐
ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐
cause of unexpected movement of the rear
seat backrest.◀
Seite 59
Transporting children safely Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 98.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
position to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐
ter this.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐
senger seat, open the backrest width com‐
pletely. Do not change the backrest width
again and do not call up a memory position.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐
rest width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise,
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
with the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
Seite 60
Controls Transporting children safely
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child
restraint fixing system.
Without a through-loading system:
Position
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated in the gap between the seat and back‐
rest.
With a through-loading system:
Position
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated behind the indicated covers.
Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the user's manual of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are
two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Seite 61
Transporting children safely Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Note
Mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐
ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
is not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 46.
Seite 62
Controls Transporting children safely
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Automatic transmission: The
engine starts if the brake is de‐
pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts if the
clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.
Ignition on
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button but do not depress the brake.
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/
Stop button, and do not press on the clutch
pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Note
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off or
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition off
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button again, but do not depress the brake.
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/
Stop button again, and do not press on the
clutch pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When ignition is switched off, selector lever
position P is engaged automatically. When in
an automatic car wash, for example, ensure
that the ignition is not switched off acciden‐
tally.◀
The ignition automatically cuts off while the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available
when the low beams are switched off.
When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if
the driver's door is open and the low
beams are switched off.
Seite 63
Driving Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
When the ignition is switched off, by opening
or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the
driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains
active.
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state:
When the engine is running: press the
Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
The radio ready state switches off automati‐
cally:
After approx. 8 minutes.
When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
Hints
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of
danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in selector lever position P or neutral
to prevent the vehicle from moving.◀
Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel
is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing
a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐
lytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
moderate engine speeds.
Diesel engine
If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐
low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may
be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐
heating.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Seite 64
Controls Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Engine stop
Hints
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot start the engine.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a
car wash, pay attention to the information re‐
garding Washing in automatic car washes, re‐
fer to page 223.
Automatic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system.
Automatic mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af‐
ter each engine start.
This function is activated at speeds faster than
about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Manual transmission:
Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
Automatic transmission:
The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
tion D.
Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been satis‐
fied.
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
External temperature too low.
The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
The passenger compartment has not yet
been heated or cooled to the required
level.
The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
After driving in reverse.
Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
The parking assistant is activated.
Stop-and-go traffic.
The transmission selector lever is in posi‐
tion N or M/S.
Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.
Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met.
The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lamps light up for varying
lengths of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Note
Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐
activated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
Excessive warming of the passenger com‐
partment when the cooling function is
switched on.
The steering wheel is turned.
Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R or
M/S.
The vehicle begins rolling.
Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐
partment when the heating is switched on.
Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de‐
pressed a number of times in succession.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press the button.
LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Transmission position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, such as when the driver is detected to be
absent.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches of the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Hints
Use while driving
If on a rare occasion it is necessary to
use the parking brake while driving, do not use
excessive force when applying it. When using
it, keep the button on the lever depressed.
Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
ing the parking brake may cause the rear
wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀
To prevent corrosion and braking control on
one side only, lightly apply the parking brake
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions
permit.
The brake lamps will not light up if the parking
brake is engaged.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
Do not fold in the exterior mirror while
driving and when the turn signals/warning
flashers are working, or else the additional
flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐
ger be in the prescribed position and will be
difficult to see.◀
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
High beams, arrow 1.
Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
No wiper operation on dry windshield
Do not use the windshield wipers if the
windshield is dry, as this may damage the
wiper blades or cause them to become worn
more quickly.◀
No wiper operation with wipers folded
away
Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded
away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be
damaged.◀
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Brief wipe: press down once.
To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Intermittent operation or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐
ing operation is started. If there is frost, wiper
operation is not started.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle lights are
switched on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are switched on.◀
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are
ready for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
tion.
Only keep it in the closed original container
and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can
result in clogging of the windshield washer
nozzles.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US
gal/1 liter.
Manual transmission
Shifting
Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐
vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.◀
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance move the selector
lever in a dynamic movement to the left and
engage the reverse gear.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 63, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
page 64, or when the ignition is switched
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
off, refer to page 63, and when position R
or D is engaged.
With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐
gaged.
If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐
gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to
roll.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Press unlock button, in order to:
Engage R.
Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1.
Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
Switching to manual mode
To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Sport automatic transmission: prevent
automatic upshifting in M/S manual
mode
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐
formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐
ple, if one of the following conditions is met:
DSC deactivated.
TRACTION activated.
SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐
tem switches back into automatic mode if the
selector lever is in transmission position D.
Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Sport automatic transmission: Launch
Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
Hints
Component wear
Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Did not use Launch Control during the break-
in, refer to page 166, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select with the
Driving Dynamics Control Sport+.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engaging the transmission position S
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position.
A flag symbol appears in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Displays
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge  80
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps  78
4 Tachometer  80
5 Engine oil temperature  80
6 Current fuel consumption  82
7 Electronic displays  77
8 Display/reset miles  81
Seite 75
Displays Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Fuel gauge  80
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps  78
4 Tachometer  80
5 Engine oil temperature  80
6 Current fuel consumption  82
7 Electronic displays  77
8 Display/reset miles  81
Seite 76
Controls Displays
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control  78
Time  81
Date  81
External temperature  81
Selection lists  85
Service requirements  82
Miles/trip miles  81
Computer  86
2 Transmission display  74
Gear shift indicator  83
3 Status, Driving Dynamics Control  118
Seite 77
Displays Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Time  81
External temperature  81
Date  81
Selection list, e.g., radio  85
Speed limit detection  83
Computer  86
Miles/trip miles  81
Navigation display, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
2 Energy recovery  82
Transmission display  74
Current fuel consumption  82
ECO PRO  173
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control  78
Service requirements  82
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output
and a text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Seite 78
Controls Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal.
Front fog lamps.
High beams.
High-beam Assistant.
Parking lamps, headlamp control.
Active Cruise Control.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control: collision warning.
Pedestrian warning.
Speed limit, adjustable.
Cruise control.
Lane departure warning.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control is activated.
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Flat Tire Monitor.
Symbol Function or system
Safety belts.
Airbag system.
Steering system.
Engine functions.
Parking brake.
Brake system.
In Canadian models
Parking brake.
Brake system.
ABS Antilock Brake System.
ABS Antilock Brake System in
Canadian models.
At least one Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐
bol in display).
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
a fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
"Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
"Service request"
Contact your service center.
"Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that are displayed during
driving are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 180.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
Seite 80
Controls Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 203.
Odometer and trip odometer
Odometer, arrow 1.
Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob.
When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on
roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐
creased risk of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 88.
Date
The date is displayed in the
computer.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 88.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Seite 81
Displays Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle is converted to electrical
energy while coasting. The vehi‐
cle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be re‐
duced.
Service requirements
The concept
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in
the instrument cluster after the ignition is
switched on.
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service
specialist.
Display
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center
before a service due date.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The deadline for service or a
legally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Seite 82
Controls Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center
before a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and
the country-specific version of the vehicle, the
gear shift indicator is active in the manual
mode of the automatic transmission and in the
manual transmission.
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Manual transmission: displays
Symbol Description
Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Shift into neutral.
Automatic transmission: displays
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection with
No Passing Information
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera at the base
of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic
signs at the edge of the road as well as variable
overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra
symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also
detected and compared with vehicle interior
data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐
played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
Seite 83
Displays Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
No Passing Information
No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐
ter displays the beginnings and ends of no
passing zones detected by the camera. The
system accounts for only the beginnings and
ends of No Passing zones marked by signs.
No display is shown:
In countries where No Passing zones are
primarily identified with road markings.
On routes without signage.
Where there are railroad crossings, high‐
way markings or other situations where no
signage is present, but passing would not
be permitted.
Hints
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
At a glance
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
ment cluster via the onboard computer. No
Passing Information is displayed together with
the activated speed limit information.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection is not
available.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
No Passing Information
Start of No Passing zone.
End of No Passing zone.
No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
When signs are concealed by objects.
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
When driving toward bright lights.
When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in the road net‐
work.
When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel and the display in the instru‐
ment cluster:
Current audio source.
Redial on telephone.
Activation of the voice activation system.
In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics
Control are displayed.
Display
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Activating a list and creating the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐
wheel.
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information
on the info display:
Range.
Average fuel consumption.
Current fuel consumption.
Average speed.
Date.
Speed limit detection.
Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
play is inactive.
ECO PRO bonus range.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
If there is only enough fuel left for less than
45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
changes.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period during which the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the
turn signal lever.
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 83, function.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Trip computer
The vehicle features two types of computer.
"Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
"Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to
a standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip computer
on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Sport displays
In the Control Display, the current values for
power and torque can be displayed.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Displaying sport displays in the
Control Display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Sport displays"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Assist system information
Display on the Control Display
Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driver assistance info"
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
Certain sitting positions.
Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
Wet roads.
Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
Speed.
Navigation system.
Check Control messages.
Collision warning.
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Speed limit detection.
Cruise control.
Pedestrian warning.
Selection list from the instrument cluster.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adjusting the height
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the rotation
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive
Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐
come lamps, Daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
Switch position: 0, ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the vehicle battery may be‐
come discharged and it would then be impos‐
sible to start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 92.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in
position or : parking and interior lamps
come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked
depending on the ambient light.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐
tion is switched off.
Setting the duration
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Seite 91
Lamps Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position 0, or .
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐
tivate the daytime running lights.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is
switched on as a corneringlamp. As a result
the inside of the curve is better lighted.
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
The cornering lamps are automatically
switched on depending on the steering angle
or the use of turn signals.
Seite 92
Controls Lamps
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the cornering
lamp is active.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off or suppresses the light in the areas that
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on whenever the traf‐
fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams on and off
as usual.
Activating
The High-beam Assistant can be activated
when the low beams are switched on.
1.
Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever,
arrow.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
High beams on, arrow 1.
High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore,
manually switch off the high beams in situa‐
tions where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
Seite 93
Lamps Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
At low speeds.
When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The low beams must be switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 92, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and
off
Press the button.
Seite 94
Controls Lamps
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be
switched on.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be adjusted in the interior for some lights.
Selecting color scheme
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
If the color scheme of the line is selected and
the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome
lamps are displayed in the color of the line
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness
The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 95
Lamps Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Safety
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Seite 96
Controls Safety
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
Keep at a distance from the airbags.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐
gered.
There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
and do not attach holders such as for navi‐
gation instruments and mobile phones.
Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
Do not remove the steering wheel.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
the service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
sives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
which could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Seite 97
Safety Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
When there is a malfunction, have the
airbag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag
system checked immediately; otherwise, there
is a risk that the system does not function as
expected in the event of an accident despite
corresponding severity of the accident.◀
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated
accordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐
ger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically recommended
by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty.
The airbags on the front
passenger side are not acti‐
vated.
The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Seite 98
Controls Safety
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat,
make sure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on
the position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury
or damage to objects.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system warns you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
Hints
Tire damage due to external factors
Sudden tire damage caused by external
influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
Pay attention to the other information and indi‐
cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 187, as well when using the system.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐
sured.
Reset the system again after each correction
of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire
or wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
Seite 99
Safety Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
The system is being reset.
Malfunction.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the tire inflation pressures set are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically during driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐
cally.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Then perform the reset.
Seite 100
Controls Safety
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐
tronics. In this case, have the electronics
checked at the next opportunity and have
them replaced if necessary.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
that case, carry out a reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Required inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out
a reset of the system.
In some cases, a wheel was changed without
having carried out a reset.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported even though the tire inflation pres‐
sures are correct.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,
due to driving or because of the heat of the
Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.
The tire pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. This behavior may
cause a warning to be issued if temperatures
fall very sharply.
Seite 101
Safety Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if neces‐
sary.
Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
Disturbance by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system detects a pressure loss on the ba‐
sis of speed differences between the individual
wheels while driving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
Seite 102
Controls Safety
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
When the system has not been initialized.
When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
wheels, high lateral acceleration.
When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Seite 103
Safety Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more of the
following systems, which can help to avoid an
imminent collision. These systems are active
automatically every time the engine is started
using the Start/Stop button:
Collision warning, refer to page 105.
Pedestrian warning, refer to page 110.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
Seite 104
Controls Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after each engine start via the start/
stop button.
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Collision warning
Depending on how the equipment is equipped,
the collision warning system consists of one of
the two systems:
Collision warning with City Braking func‐
tion, refer to page 105;
Collision warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 108
Collision warning with City
Braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents. If
an accident cannot be prevented, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐
pendently.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these
warnings may vary depending on the current
driving situation.
Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐
vention occurs when appropriate.
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Detection range
Vehicles are observed when they are traveling
in the same direction of movement if they are
located within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Switch the system back on: press the button
again.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Note
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase braking and distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake
booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently
strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition,
if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐
sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐
tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow
speed to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up until reaching a complete stop, the
engine may be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Tow-starting and towing
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;
otherwise, improper behavior of the braking
function of individual systems could result in
an accident.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
In tight curves.
If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and also includes a
braking function.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in
conjunction with a camera.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time
of these warnings may vary depending on the
current driving situation.
Detection range
It responds to stationary or moving objects
that are within the detection range of the radar
system.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Switch the system back on: press the button
again.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Display
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only.
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Tow-starting and towing
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;
otherwise, improper behavior of the braking
function of individual systems could result in
an accident.◀
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
In tight curves.
If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The system is controlled via the camera in the
base of the interior mirror.
General information
The system issues a warning with brightness
staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and assists with a
brake intervention shortly before a collision.
It responds to persons that are within the de‐
tection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas.
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Note
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake
booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently
strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition,
if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐
sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐
tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow
speed to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up until reaching a complete stop, the
engine may be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Tow-starting and towing
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;
otherwise, improper behavior of the braking
function of individual systems could result in
an accident.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capability of the camera is lim‐
ited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
Partially covered pedestrians.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
In tight curves.
If the camera view field or the front wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
When driving toward bright lights.
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
cle.◀
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display in the instrument cluster
Lines: system is activated.
Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐
tected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
When returning to your own lane.
When braking hard.
When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐
ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
When driving toward bright lights.
When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper
monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights
up dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Active Blind Spot Detection
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds
above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during full braking. This
system utilizes all of the benefits provided by
ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in bends.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Seite 116
Controls Driving stability control systems
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in
which forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
Above 31 mph/50 km/h DTC is automatically
deactivated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 118.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
Seite 117
Driving stability control systems Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Variable sport steering
The variable sport steering increases the
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
parking and maneuvering.
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to
adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle.
Various programs can be selected for this pur‐
pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the
DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate
a program.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control.
The vehicle has a flat tire.
When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 116, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 117, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in bends.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
bilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the instrument
cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights
up.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
and engine control for greater driving agility
with maximum driving stabilization.
Seite 118
Controls Driving stability control systems
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 119, the SPORT driving
mode can be set to individual specifications.
Activating SPORT.
"Configure SPORT"
Configuring the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
4. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 118.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 173, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Configuring drive program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
SPORT, refer to page 119.
ECO PRO, refer to page 174.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1.
"Settings"
Seite 119
Driving stability control systems Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is being used, the vehicle may roll back
slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
Seite 120
Controls Driving stability control systems
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐
cle ahead begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your
drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is
able to accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
ahead of you drives away again, your own vehi‐
cle can still be accelerated automatically and
simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to
the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
General information
Depending on the set driving program, the
characteristics of the cruise control can
change in certain areas.
Hints
Personal responsibility
Even an active system does not release
the driver from personal responsibility for the
driving process, especially for lane tracking,
adaptation of speed, distance and driving style
to the traffic conditions.
Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all
traffic situations.
Monitor the driving process, the surrounding
area and what is occurring in traffic continu‐
ously and attentively and actively intervene as
required, e.g., by braking, steering or making
an evasive maneuver.◀
Unfavorable weather conditions
In the event of unfavorable weather and
light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,
slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer
recognition of vehicles and lane limits as well
as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already detected. Drive attentively, and react to
the current traffic events. Intervene actively
when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or
making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there
is danger of an accident.◀
Seite 121
Driving comfort Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press the
button
Function
System on/off, interrupt, refer to
page 122
Maintaining/storing the speed,
refer to page 123
Resume speed, refer to
page 124
Reduce distance, refer to
page 124
Increase distance, refer to
page 124
Rocker switch:
Maintaining/storing the speed,
refer to page 123
Changing, maintaining, and
storing the speed, refer to
page 123
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐
ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐
try-specific variants.
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
tection of vehicles.
If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering
and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button.
If active: press twice.
If interrupted: press once.
Seite 122
Controls Driving comfort
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
When the brakes are applied.
When transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
activated or DSC is deactivated.
When DSC is actively controlling stability.
When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing still.
If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without road edge line
markings.
If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 125.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing
the speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted to maintain and store the
current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system for example in the follow‐
ing situations:
When catching up rapidly with a truck.
When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀
Seite 123
Driving comfort Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain
the prescribed safety distance.◀
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 125, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 125, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
When the system is switched off.
When the ignition is switched off.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill.
Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
dar sensor moves off.
Marking in the speedometer turns orange:
no automatic driving away.
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator or press
the RES or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection
range has moved off.
Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing
on the brake pedal and it is standing behind
another vehicle:
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press
the RES rocker switch when the vehicle
ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
Distance display
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to
the traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneuver.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The maximum speed that can be set depends
on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity of the camera and the sensor, you
should be alert at all times so that you can in‐
tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
Red traffic lights.
Stationary objects.
Cross traffic.
Oncoming traffic.
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if necessary. You must react yourself;
otherwise, there is the danger of an accident
occurring.◀
Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
does not react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate
speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not
be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐
able delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may
react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of
the vehicle by the system can be compensated
for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or
behind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
stant speed, for instance:
On curvy roads.
In heavy traffic.
On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
cle and cause an accident.◀
General information
Depending on the set driving program, the
characteristics of the cruise control can
change in certain areas.
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press the button Function
System on/off, interrupt
Store speed
Resume speed
Rocker switch: change,
hold, store speed
Controls
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if
necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
If active: press twice.
If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The brakes are applied.
The clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
The transmission position D is disengaged.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
DSC is actively controlling stability.
When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the button.
Or
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 130.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Changing/maintaining speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted in order to maintain and
store the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal. After
the rocker switch is released, the vehicle
maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed
The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind your vehicle are indicated with:
Signal tones.
Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers.
The range, depending on the environment, is
approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
To ensure full operability:
Do not cover sensors, e.g., by stickers, bi‐
cycle racks and the like.
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Hints
Personal responsibility
Even an active system does not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility for the
driving process.
Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all
traffic situations.
Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐
ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle
and the traffic situation, and actively intervene
when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an
accident.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
PDC Park Distance Control
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the rearview camera, refer to page 133, can be
switched on.
Switching on the rearview camera via
the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
nal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off:
When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,
refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are displayed on the Control
Display before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors red, green and yellow.
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
it again appears on the display. To switch to
PDC:
1.
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
Seite 131
Driving comfort Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
the following circumstances:
For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐
trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or
loud machines.
When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐
aged.
Under certain weather conditions, e.g.,
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or
strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
With objects with a fine surface structure,
such as fences.
For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
In heavy rain.
When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
When sensors are covered in snow.
On rough road surfaces.
On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
In heavy exhaust.
Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
ous tone alternating between the front and
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
ger present, the system is again fully func‐
tional.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
Rearview camera, refer to page 133
Side View, refer to page 135.
Top View, refer to page 136.
Seite 132
Controls Driving comfort
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the backup
camera.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Rearview camera
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired
by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 226.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via
the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
Seite 133
Driving comfort Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The rearview camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
The rearview camera is switched on.
The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐
played.
Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age when in drive mode R.
Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Are dependent on the current steering an‐
gle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age.
Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed af‐
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐
tain angle.
Obstacle marking
General information
Marks for detected obstacles can be shown in
the rearview camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐
cle lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 130.
The objects displayed in the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
distance from the objects on the display.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
Notes
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
ture the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 226.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show
the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Top View
The concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the doors and
the road area around the vehicle are shown on
the Control Display for this purpose.
Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the
cameras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Top View
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 226.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select drive mode R with the engine running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
Switching on the backup camera via
the iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The backup camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in
the PDC display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
it again appears on the display when reverse
gear is selected. To switch to Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged
drive mode and the current steering angle.
The track line is continuously adjusted for
the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
With a door open.
With the trunk lid open.
With an exterior mirror folded in.
In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information and instructions issued
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
view camera and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 130.
Hints
Personal responsibility
Even an active system does not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility for the
driving process.
Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all
traffic situations.
Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐
ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle
and the traffic situation, and actively intervene
when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an
accident.◀
Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the
system.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
cle may become damaged.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure
Doors and trunk lid closed.
Parking brake released.
When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set where applicable.
Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the wheel arches.
To ensure full operability:
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with the reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate:
"Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
Press the button.
Switch off the ignition.
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Status display
Depending on the appointment version, differ‐
ent views of the status display are shown and
are described below as View 1, refer to
page 140, or View 2, refer to page 141.
Status of the system, Display 1
The status is displayed with symbols.
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Gray: parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
found.
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been
seized.
Status of the parking space search
Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
The vehicle is parked in the parking space
if the parking procedure is active.
No display: no parking space search.
Status of the system, Display 2
Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐
sistant is activated and search for parking
space active.
Suitable parking spaces are displayed next
to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the
road as on the Control Display. When the
parking assistant is active, suitable parking
spaces are highlighted.
The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been seized.
Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forwards
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Check the traffic situation as well
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐
ing assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident.◀
1.
Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if necessary.
The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement as required after the gear
change when the vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
"Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
Press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.
If a turn signal is activated in the opposite
direction to the desired side for parking.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
if necessary.
When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Continuing
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if necessary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to do this.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
On slippery ground.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
When leaves or snow has collected in the
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
the following circumstances:
For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐
trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or
loud machines.
When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐
aged.
Under certain weather conditions, e.g.,
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or
strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
With objects with a fine surface structure,
such as fences.
For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Climate control
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left  52
2 Vent settings
3 Rear window defroster
4 Air flow
5 AUTO program
6 Temperature
7 Seat heating, right  52
8 Cooling function
9 Recirculated-air mode
10 Interior temperature sensor
Seite 144
Controls Climate control
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
Windows.
Upper body region.
Windows, upper body region, and foot‐
well.
Footwell.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
necessary, use the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Air flow, manual
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The air flow of the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 145, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the de‐
sired temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐
put, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and, depending on the temperature setting,
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
Seite 145
Climate control Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if nec‐
essary.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐
ily.◀
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Switching on
Press any button except
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi‐
cle.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left  52
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program
4 Display
Seite 146
Controls Climate control
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
5 Maximum cooling
6 Temperature, right
7 Seat heating, right  52
8 Cooling function
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
10 Air distribution, right
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
12 Air distribution, left
13 Rear window defroster
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
Climate control functions in detail
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the de‐
sired temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐
put, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 147, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐
matic control of the air flow and air distribution
can be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
The air flow can be adjusted when the program
is active.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and, depending on the temperature setting,
warmed again.
Seite 147
Climate control Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐
matically.
Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐
shield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐
ily.◀
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select
a program:
Upper body region.
Upper body region and footwell.
Footwell.
Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Air flow, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air flow,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Seite 148
Controls Climate control
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Switching on
Press any button except
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi‐
cle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
Adjusting the ventilation
Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot
from the sun.
Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in the rear
Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐
essary.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset switch-on times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Seite 149
Climate control Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 150
Controls Climate control
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Universal garage door
opener
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
animals, or objects in the range of movement
of the remote-controlled device; otherwise,
there is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ally compatible with the universal garage door
opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
Your service center.
www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐
son Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview
mirror
LED, arrow 1.
Buttons, arrow 2.
The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
Seite 151
Interior equipment Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is
flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior rearview mirror has been
programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-
code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
tem also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual of the sys‐
tem being set up for information on how to
synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
To synchronize:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this work step up to three times in
order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐
chronization is complete, the programmed
function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this
Seite 152
Controls Interior equipment
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
indicates that the button on the interior
rearview mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the
integrated universal remote control, ensure
that there are no people, animals, or objects
within the range of movement of the remote-
controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of
injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the system
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Digital compass
At a glance
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 153
Interior equipment Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone correspond‐
ing to your location appears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
The wrong point of the compass is dis‐
played.
The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
Not all points of the compass are dis‐
played.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to switch between English "E"
and German "O".
Seite 154
Controls Interior equipment
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
The setting is stored automatically after ap‐
proximately 10 seconds.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Raise cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
devices
Hints
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Seite 155
Interior equipment Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Front center console
Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐
rette lighter.
In the front passenger footwell
The socket is located below the glove com‐
partment.
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the left side in the
cargo area.
USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
Personal Profile settings, refer to page 36.
Music collection.
Importing Trips.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Seite 156
Controls Interior equipment
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
With Professional navigation system
or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Notes
Observe the following when connecting:
Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
Do not connect USB hard drives.
Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Through-loading system
The concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
If equipped with through-loading system: the
rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–
40.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
Hints
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in or reaches into the area of
movement of the rear seat backrests when the
middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐
jury or damage may result.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before installation of child restraint sys‐
tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest
tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against
the backrest and securely latch all backrests.
Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐
ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐
cause of unexpected movement of the rear
seat backrest.◀
Retract the head restraint if necessary
before backrest is folded down
With folding head restraints, fold in the head
restraints before folding down the backrests,
or damage may result.◀
Opening
1.
Unlock the belt lock of the center safety
belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐
other safety belt.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear window shelf.
3. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go.
Seite 157
Interior equipment Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves
forward slightly.
6. Fold backrest forward.
Closing
1.
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐
gaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the passenger compart‐
ment during braking or evasive maneuvers
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on
the rear window shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
To secure cargo, refer to page 170, with nets
or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
Folding down the middle section
1. Fold in the middle head restraint.
2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle
section forward.
Seite 158
Controls Interior equipment
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
compartment without securing them; other‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐
neuvers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 160.
Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 159.
Without Smoker's package: Front storage
compartment, in front of the cupholders,
refer to page 160.
Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 160.
Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 160.
Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 161.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
The net in the glove compartment is provided
for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder,
refer to page 161.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Seite 159
Storage compartments Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the trunk
lid, refer to page 41, for example.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Front storage compartment
Raise the lid to open it.
Compartments in the doors
Do not stow any breakable objects
Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
cident.◀
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
Seite 160
Controls Storage compartments
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Connection for an external audio
device
.
Storage compartment in the
rear
Storage compartment is located in the rear
center console.
Cupholders
Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
Front
Storage tray for front cupholders
The cupholder with the storage tray can be
used for additional storage. To do this, place
the storage tray in the cupholder.
Only use the storage tray for small objects,
such as keys or the remote control.
When not in use, stow the storage tray in the
glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray
into the net so that the top surface faces up.
Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Pushing back the covers
Push back the covers before folding up
the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder
could become damaged.◀
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
Seite 161
Storage compartments Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located on the left
side.
Located on the right side is a storage compart‐
ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 206, and first aid kit, refer to page 218.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
Hooks/multi-function hook
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks
can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Light and suitable objects only
Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger
of objects flying about during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the right side
trim for fastening small objects.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 170, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load, refer to page 170, and to store small
parts.
Storage compartment under cargo
floor panel
Maximum load
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/
20 kg in the storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.◀
Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch
at top, if necessary, arrow 2.
Partitioning the compartment
The compartment can be divided using an at‐
tachable partition.
Seite 162
Controls Storage compartments
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Seite 163
Storage compartments Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and
93 mph/150 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake
discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during
this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road
users may be injured, and the vehicle may be
damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
ter the passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Greatly increase the blower speed.
Drive moderately.
Seite 166
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐
age.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is the danger of getting burned.◀
Diesel particulate filter
The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐
cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐
peratures.
During the cleaning time of several minutes,
the following may occur:
Temporarily, the engine may run less
smoothly.
Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐
ing from the exhaust until shortly after the
engine is shut down.
A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐
sary to achieve the accustomed perform‐
ance.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐
munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐
side the vehicle without connecting them di‐
rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐
tion, there is no assurance that the radiation
generated during transmission will be dis‐
charged from the vehicle interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive through calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
electrical systems and the transmission may
be damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Seite 167
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Objects within the range of movement
of the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving and create the risk of an
accident.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet coated with road salt or
there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐
sure on the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if necessary.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐
tamination on the brake pads are furthered by:
Low mileage.
Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Traces of water under the vehicle like this are
normal.
Seite 168
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Loading
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and
increases the rate at which damage develops
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger
the car's occupants if sudden braking or
swerving becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Seite 169
Loading Driving tips
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo there are four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load and to store small parts.
Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
area floor.
Securing cargo
Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or draw straps.
Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Seite 170
Driving tips Loading
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger
the car's occupants if sudden braking or
swerving becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Note
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The roof load should not be too large in
area.
Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 171
Loading Driving tips
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption values in
various ways, for instance fuel consumption
can be influenced by the size of the tires.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Seite 172
Driving tips Saving fuel
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Avoid high engine speeds
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly.
When accelerating, shift up before reaching
high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi‐
cates the most fuel efficient gear.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
automatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐
turely.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
are not actually needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort functions.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
The maintenance should be carried out by
your service center.
Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer
to page 204.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the
climate control output, are adjusted.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
that optimizes fuel consumption.
In the instrument display, the extension of the
range achieved by this can be displayed as a
bonus range.
Seite 173
Saving fuel Driving tips
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
At a glance
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 174.
ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 175
ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 174.
Activate ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Configure the program.
Via the iDrive
1.
"Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
Or
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip
"Tip at:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
"ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐
cient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel
consumption can be economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
mirror heating are also reduced.
The exterior mirror heating is made available
when outside temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential
The percentage of potential savings that can
be achieved with the current configuration is
displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An extension of the range can
be achieved by an adjusted driv‐
ing style.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Driving style
In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐
dicates the current efficiency of the driving
style.
Seite 174
Driving tips Saving fuel
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for
energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display
when accelerating.
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by
the color of the bar:
Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving
are met.
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction
The arrow indicates that the
driving style can be adjusted to
be more fuel efficient by backing
off the accelerator for instance.
Note
The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in
the instrument cluster appear when the ECO
PRO display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
ECO PRO tip - Symbols
An additional symbol and a text instruction are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving style, back off
the accelerator or delay accelerating
to allow time to assess road condi‐
tions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Symbol Measure
Automatic transmission: switch
from M/S to D and avoid manual
shift interventions.
Manual shift transmission: follow
shifting instructions.
Manual shift transmission: engage
neutral for engine stop.
Indications on the Control Display
EfficientDynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed during driving.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected time frame.
Trip interruptions are represented below the
bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
Automatic engine start-stop function.
Seite 175
Saving fuel Driving tips
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Energy recovery.
Climate control output.
Coasting.
Display ECO PRO tips
"ECO PRO Tips"
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Coasting
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when transmission position D is engaged.
The vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐
sion position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed, the engine is automatically coupled
to the transmission again.
Hints
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 173, driving mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A forward-looking driving style helps the driver
to use the function as often as possible and
supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐
ing.
Safety mode
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions is satisfied.
DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
Cruise control activated.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
the following conditions are satisfied:
Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
tion D.
Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the bar display be‐
low the tachometer is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero
point. The tachometer approxi‐
mately indicates idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.
The distance traveled in the Coasting driving
condition is indicated by a counter.
Seite 176
Driving tips Saving fuel
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO, refer to page 174, menu, e.g., to
use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
ECO PRO driving style analysis
The concept
The system helps in this situation to develop
an especially efficient driving style and to con‐
serve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
Functional requirement
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. Select the symbol.
Display
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized road route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted road route be‐
comes, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during the drive.
Tips about the energy saving driving style,
Conserving fuel, refer to page 172.
Seite 177
Saving fuel Driving tips
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hints
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Diesel engines
The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐
sel fuel pumps.
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
Seite 180
Mobility Refueling
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To
do this, turn the cap.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
Seite 181
Refueling Mobility
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Fuel recommendation
Note
General fuel quality
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. Switch gas stations
or use fuel from brand name producers having
a higher octane level; otherwise, engine prob‐
lems, such as poor engine starting perform‐
ance, poorer handling characteristics or driving
performance may occur.◀
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic
converter and other components.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not refuel with Ethanol above the
maximum Ethanol proportion
Do not refuel with Ethanol above the maximum
Ethanol proportion, that is, refueling with fuel
that contains more than 10 % Ethanol, flex fuel
or other alcohols; otherwise, damage to the
engine and fuel supply could result.◀
Gasoline quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Fuel quality
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
ers.
Seite 182
Mobility Fuel
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Diesel
Low-Sulfur Diesel
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with low sulfur content:
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must
not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use
gasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong
fuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as
this may damage the engine.◀
After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐
ice center or roadside assistance.
If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler
pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that
you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is
equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel
cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for
instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐
mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to
page 218.
Winter diesel
To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐
erational in the winter, use winter diesel.
It is available at gas stations during winter
months.
The fuel filter heating system, included as a
standard feature, prevents disruption of the
fuel supply while driving.
Do not add any diesel additives
Do not add additives, including gasoline;
otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀
BMW Advanced Diesel
The concept
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐
ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel
exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust
system. A chemical reaction takes place inside
the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen
oxides.
The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled.
To be able to start the engine as usual, there
must be an adequate reducing agent.
Reducing agent is added by the service center.
Warming up the system
In order to warm the engine up to its operating
temperature after a cold start, the automatic
transmission may subsequently shift up to the
next higher gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Reserve display
This display in the instrument cluster provides
information about the distance that can still be
driven with the current reserve level.
The reserve indication is dis‐
played starting at approx.
1,000 miles/1,600 km remaining
range.
Seite 183
Fuel Mobility
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Refill in good time
The reducing agent must be replenished
as soon as the Reserve display appears, other‐
wise the engine cannot be restarted.◀
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
The engine will continue to run
even when the display shows --,
as long as it is not switched off
and all other operating condi‐
tions are satisfied, sufficient fuel
for example.
Engine does not start
Do not continue driving to the limit of the
remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you will
not be able to restart the engine after switch‐
ing it off.◀
Filling with incorrect fuel
A Check Control message is displayed when
the tank is filled with the incorrect fuel.
After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐
ice center.
System defect
A Check Control message is displayed when
there is a system defect.
Have the diesel exhaust fluid
replenished
The reducing agent is added by the service
center within the context of regular mainte‐
nance. Provided you observe this maintenance
schedule, it is normally necessary to replenish
the fluid once between maintenance appoint‐
ments.
It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐
ished several times under particular circum‐
stances, for example, if the vehicle is driven in
a particularly sporty style or if it is driven at
high altitudes.
The reducing agent must be replenished as
soon as the reserve display appears in the in‐
strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐
start the engine.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low
temperatures
Due to its physical properties, it is possible
that reducing agent may also need to be re‐
plenished between regular maintenance ap‐
pointments if it is exposed to temperatures be‐
low + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducing
agent only immediately before starting to drive.
The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐
serve display in the instrument cluster.
At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃ the fill
level in some cases cannot be measured.
After adding reducing agent, the reserve dis‐
play is displayed only until the fill level can be
measured again.
Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional cases
You can replenish reducing agent yourself in
exceptional cases, e.g., to get to the service
center.
Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid
Do not come into contact with the reduc‐
ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritations
may result.◀
Handling Diesel exhaust fluid
When working with reducing agent in
closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. When
the bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐
ing fumes may escape.◀
Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach
of children
Keep reducing agent out of reach of children◀
Avoid contact with surfaces
Avoid contact of reducing agent with sur‐
faces of the vehicle. Damage could result.◀
Seite 184
Mobility Fuel
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid
Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With
this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel
exhaust fluid can be replenished simply
and safely.
Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32
Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your
Service Center.
Refill quantity
When the Reserve display starts, add at least 2
bottles of reducing agent.
This corresponds to approx. 1 gallon.
Tank for reducing agent
The tank for the reducing agent is located next
to the fuel tank.
Adding engine oil
1.
Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 180.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it
will go, see arrow.
4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.
The vehicle container will be filled.
The container is full when the fill level in
the bottle no longer changes. It is not pos‐
sible to overfill.
5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐
screw it.
6. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise.
7. Close the fuel filler flap.
After adding Diesel exhaust fluid
Note
Incorrect fluids
After filling with incorrect fluids, such as
antifreeze for washer water, do not start the
engine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀
Contact your service center.
Disposing of bottles
You take your empty Diesel exhaust
fluid bottles to your Service Center for
disposal.
Seite 185
Fuel Mobility
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐
hold waste unless this is permitted by local
regulations.
Reserve display
The Reserve display will still ap‐
pear along with the remaining
range after refilling.
Engine can be started.
After several minutes of driving,
the Reserve indication goes out.
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
After filling, the indication -- is
still displayed.
Only after the display goes out
can the engine -- be started.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute.
2. Engine can be started.
Seite 186
Mobility Fuel
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
The service life of the tires.
Road safety.
Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of pres‐
sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
Tires heat up during driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the temper‐
ature of the tire. The tire inflation pressure
specifications relate to cold tires or tires with
the ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 188, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire
brands. This information can be obtained from
your service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 188, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Seite 187
Wheels and tires Mobility
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
320i, 320i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 225/50 R 17
94 W RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 17
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 32
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
328i, 328d
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 225/50 R 17
94 W RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 17
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 35
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 32
Seite 188
Mobility Wheels and tires
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
328i xDrive, 328d xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 225/50 R 17
94 W RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 17
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 32
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
335i, 335i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Seite 189
Wheels and tires Mobility
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
320i, 320i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
Front: 225/50 R 17
94 W RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 17
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Seite 190
Mobility Wheels and tires
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
Front: 225/50 R 17
94 W RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 17
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
328i, 328i xDrive, 328d, 328d xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V M
+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M
+S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
225/45 R 18 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V M
+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Front: 225/50 R 17
94 W RSC
Rear:
255/45 R 17 98 W
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear:
255/40 R 18 95 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear:
255/35 R 19 92 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.8 / 41
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
3.2 / 46
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 191
Wheels and tires Mobility
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 H M
+S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V M
+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Front: 225/50 R 17
94 W RSC
Rear:
255/45 R 17 98 W
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear:
255/40 R 18 95 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear:
255/35 R 19 92 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.8 / 41
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
3.2 / 46
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
335i, 335i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 91 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
3.0 / 44
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.9 /42
-
-
3.4 / 49
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Seite 192
Mobility Wheels and tires
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
3.0 / 44
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.9 /42
-
-
3.4 / 49
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
1013: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the
10th week 2013.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
Seite 193
Wheels and tires Mobility
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Seite 194
Mobility Wheels and tires
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
Unusual vibrations during driving.
Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center.
Have the vehicle towed or transported there.
Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat‐
ening for vehicle occupants and also other
road users.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the service center about the right
wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions
for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Seite 195
Wheels and tires Mobility
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle if they are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐
age and accidents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Seite 196
Mobility Wheels and tires
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 104.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 101.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of the
vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.
Information about the approved snow chains
are available from the service center.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
205/60 R 16.
225/55 R 16.
225/50 R 17.
225/45 R 18.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Seite 197
Wheels and tires Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative terminal
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Engine compartment fuse box
6 Oil filler neck
7 Coolant reservoir
The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
Seite 198
Mobility Engine compartment
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Hood
Hints
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐
ment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces or
gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot
parts.◀
Fold down wiper arm
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this
may result in damage.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever in the interior:
Engine is released, arrow 1.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again:
Hood can be opened, arrow 2.
Indicator/warning lamps
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 199
Engine compartment Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions. When
a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil
consumption, for example, is clearly higher.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles.
Status display
Detailed measurement
Checking the oil level
electronically
Status display
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically during
driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a
check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the oil level
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
messages.
If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
125 miles/200 km Add oil, refer to page 201.
Engine oil level too low
Add oil immediately; otherwise, an insuf‐
ficient amount of engine oil could result in en‐
gine damage.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the oil level is
checked and displayed via a scale.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Seite 200
Mobility Engine oil
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Requirements
Vehicle is on level road.
Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
Automatic transmission: selector lever in
transmission position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed.
Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a
scale.
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Filler neck
Only replenish the maximum oil amount of
1 US quart/liter if the signal is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Adding oil
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.◀
Do not add too much engine oil
When too much engine oil is added, im‐
mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
this may cause engine damage.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Seite 201
Engine oil Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04.
Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification.
Diesel engine
API ILSAC GF-5.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having the engine oil changed by your service
center.
Seite 202
Mobility Engine oil
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Engine oil change
Coolant
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hints
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about the
suitable additives are available from the service
center.
Coolant level
Checking
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Symbol Meaning
Maximum
Minimum
Filling
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐
cess pressure to dissipate, and then open
it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the cap must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 203
Coolant Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 82, can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Note
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for onboard diagnostics may
only be used by the service center or a work‐
shop that operates in accordance with the
specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with
Seite 204
Mobility Maintenance
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
correspondingly trained personnel and other
authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result
in operating problems for the vehicle.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 205
Maintenance Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the
right side in the cargo area in a storage com‐
partment. Open the cover.
Wiper blade replacement
Note
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 70, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
hood
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
the windshield to prevent damage.◀
Lamp and bulb replacement
Hints
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
Seite 206
Mobility Replacing components
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always switch off the lights af‐
fected to prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display
elements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not dim despite driving
with the light switched on, increasing humidity
forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
service center check this.
Headlamp setting
The headlamp adjustments can be affected by
changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a
change, have the headlamp setting checked
and corrected by Service.
Front lamps, bulb replacement
Halogen headlamps
1 Parking lamps
2 High beams/headlamp flasher
3 Low beams
4 Turn signal
5 Daytime running lights
Seite 207
Replacing components Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Accessing the turn signals and low beams
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
Turn signal
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1.
If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Low beams
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
from the holder and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb.
4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
5. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
place.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
7. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Seite 208
Mobility Replacing components
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Accessing the daytime running lights, high
beams/headlamp flasher and parking
lamps
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 199.
2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
Parking lamps
6-watt bulb, H6W.
1.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed
in reverse order of removal. Make sure that
the bulb holder snaps into place.
4. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
High beams/headlamp flasher
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
from the holder and remove.
2. Pull the connector off the bulb.
3. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
4. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
place.
5. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
Seite 209
Replacing components Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Daytime running lights
24-watt bulb, PW24W.
1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb
connector.
2. Remove the bulb holder.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐
tom of the bulb holder must be facing
downward. Make sure that the bulb holder
snaps into place.
5. Attach the high beam bulb connector.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Headlamps
1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
The parking lamps and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
Seite 210
Mobility Replacing components
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Front fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
35-watt bulb, H8.
1.
Use the back side of the screwdriver from
the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐
row 2.
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.
Turn the bulb, arrow 2.
Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.
Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐
wise.
Remove the bulb.
3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
and screw on the wheel house panel.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
Seite 211
Replacing components Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lamps
5 Outside brake lamp
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐
tact your service center in the event of a mal‐
function.
Use caution when replacing the bulb
Use caution and proceed one step at a
time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐
age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀
Removing the exterior tail lamp
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen the screw, arrow 1,
and remove the cover, arrow 2.
3. Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the
two nuts, arrows 1 and 2, and remove. The
tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount
on the outside.
4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and
carefully swing it back and out of the rub‐
ber mount, arrow 1. Use your free hand to
hold it in place in order to prevent the tail
lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make
sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on
the centering pin, arrow 2.
Seite 212
Mobility Replacing components
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
5. Remove the connecting line from the clip
on the bulb holder.
6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐
nector of the connecting line and remove
the connector from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs
1. Loosen the four fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Installing the tail lamp
1.
Connect the connecting line to the tail
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.
2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing
ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is
not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐
row 1 and the inner part onto the centering
component, arrow 2. Make sure that the
tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts.
5. Fit the cover in place and screw onto the
fastener. Make sure that the tubular seal is
not pinched.
Lamps in the trunk lid
General information
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
Reversing lamps: 16-watt bulb, PW16W.
Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W
Accessing the lamps
1.
Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐
move the six screws on the trim.
2. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid,
starting at the edge and working toward
the area around the recessed grips. Make
sure that the trim does not become stuck.
3. Carefully swing out the trim.
Seite 213
Replacing components Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner
brake lamp
1. Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull
down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐
row 2.
2. Unscrew the defective bulb from the
socket counterclockwise for reversing or
rear fog lamps.
3. Insert the new bulb.
Installing the bulb holder
1.
Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide
pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐
row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.
2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that
the two exterior holders latch into place.
3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and
secure.
Tail lamp, license plate lamp and
central brake lamp
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 206.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Changing wheels
Hints
The vehicle equipment does not include a
spare tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free. The added
amount of acid is sufficient for the service life
of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you
on questions regarding the battery.
Seite 214
Mobility Replacing components
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available and that any Check Control mes‐
sages of these comfort functions are no longer
displayed.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
When making frequent short-distance
drives.
If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 219, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
Time: update.
Date: update.
Navigation system: wait for the operability
of the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Hints
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
In the engine compartment
1.
Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
Seite 215
Replacing components Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Attaching the covers
1.
When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
Raise the cargo floor panel.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 216
Mobility Replacing components
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent Emergency
Request
Requirements
The radio ready state is switched on.
The Assist system is functional.
The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Hints
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
The LED flashes when a connection to the
BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
Seite 217
Breakdown assistance Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
if it can be established, are transmitted to
the BMW Response Center.
If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center can no longer be heard via
the speaker, you can nevertheless still be
heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the trunk lid.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First aid kit
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first aid kit is located in the cargo area in a
storage compartment.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
rectly.
For additional information, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Seite 218
Mobility Breakdown assistance
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
started in the usual way.
Seite 219
Breakdown assistance Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Note
Tow-starting and towing
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;
otherwise, improper behavior of the braking
function of individual systems could result in
an accident.◀
Switch off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to
page 104.
Automatic transmission: transporting
your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing
Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀
Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehicle
response.
Seite 220
Mobility Breakdown assistance
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Tow truck
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
Maneuvering capability is limited during
cornering.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit located in a storage compart‐
ment on the right side in the cargo area. Open
the cover.
Tow fitting, information on use
Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
Seite 221
Breakdown assistance Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Automatic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 218. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 63, on.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Seite 222
Mobility Breakdown assistance
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Care
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Car washes
Hints
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
sively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may
then lead to long-term damage.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure
washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm.◀
Regularly remove foreign items such as
leaves in the area below the windshield
when the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
in winter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage
the vehicle.
Automatic car washes
Hints
Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 69, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 45.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Manual transmission:
1.
Drive into the car wash.
2. Shift to neutral.
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Switch on the ignition.
Automatic transmission:
1.
Drive into the car wash.
Seite 223
Care Mobility
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Do not turn off the ignition in the car
wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;
otherwise, the transmission position P is
engaged and damages can result.◀
To start the engine:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
When the ignition is switched off.
After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel,
oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed
immediately to prevent the finish from being
altered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
Seite 224
Mobility Care
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
ble interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the seat
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
Imitation leather surfaces.
Headliner.
Lamp lenses.
Instrument cluster cover.
Matte black spray-coated components.
Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Seite 225
Care Mobility
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving and create the risk of an
accident.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐
ger compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Additional information is available from
the service center.
Seite 226
Mobility Care
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Seite 227
Care Mobility
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Dimensions
BMW 3 Series Limousine
Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.9/2,031
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.3/1,811
Height with roof antenna inches/mm 56.7/1,441
Height without roof antenna inches/mm 56.3/1,429
Length inches/mm 182.1/4,627
Wheel base inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3
Smallest turning circle diameter with xDrive ft/m 38.4/11.7
Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐
cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐
lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto‐
matic transmission.
320i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs
kg
4,300/4,340
1,950/1,969
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,985/900
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,480/1,125
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
Seite 230
Reference Technical data
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
328i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs
kg
4,365/4,420
1,980/2,005
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,015/914
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,510/1,139
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
335i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs
kg
4,540/4,565
2,059/2,071
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,140/971
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,535/1,150
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
320i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs
kg
4,465/4,505
2,025/2,043
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,125/964
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,510/1,139
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
Seite 231
Technical data Reference
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
328i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,585/2,080
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,170/984
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,555/1,159
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
335i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs
kg
4,675/4,695
2,121/2,130
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,280/1,034
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,560/1,161
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
328d
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,365/1,980
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,995/905
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,490/1,129
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
328d xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,540/2,059
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,160/980
Seite 232
Reference Technical data
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
328d xDrive
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,525/1,145
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank Gasoline: 15.8/60
Diesel: 15/57
Fuel quality, refer to
page 182
Seite 233
Technical data Reference
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 116
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 121
Acceleration Assistant, refer
to Launch Control 74
Activated-charcoal filter 149
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 114
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 121
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 115
Adaptive Light Control 92
Additives, oil 201
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 49
After washing vehicle 224
Airbags 96
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 97
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 145, 148
Air, dehumidifying, refer to
Cooling function 145, 147
Air distribution,
manual 145, 148
Air flow, air conditioner 145
Air flow, automatic climate
control 148
Air pressure, tires 187
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 149
Alarm system 44
Alarm, unintentional 45
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the headliner 17
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 196
All-wheel-drive 117
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 152
Alternative oil types 202
Antifreeze, washer fluid 70
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 116
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 116
Approved axle load 230
Approved engine oils 202
Arrival time 87
Ash tray 155
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 218
Assistance when driving
off 120
Assist system information, on
Control Display 89
AUTO intensity 147
Automatic car wash 223
Automatic climate con‐
trol 144
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 146
Automatic Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 121
Automatic Curb Monitor 57
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 98
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 92
Automatic locking 43
Automatic recirculated-air
control 148
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 71
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 147
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 145
AUTO program, intensity 147
Auto Start/Stop function 65
Average fuel consumption 86
Average speed 86
Axle loads, weights 230
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 51
Backrest, width 51
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 218
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 221
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 215
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 34
Battery, vehicle 214
Belts, safety belts 52
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 161
Blinds, sun protection 47
BMW Advanced Diesel 183
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 204
Bonus range, ECO PRO 174
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 161
Brake assistant 116
Seite 234
Reference Everything from A to Z
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Brake discs, breaking in 166
Brake force display 115
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 115
Brake lights, adaptive 115
Brake pads, breaking in 166
Braking, hints 167
Breakdown assis‐
tance 217, 218
Breaking in 166
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 89
Bulb replacement 206
Bulb replacement, front 207
Bulb replacement, halogen
headlamps 207
Bulb replacement, rear 212
Bulb replacement, xenon
headlamps 210
Bulbs and lamps 206
Button, RES 124
Button, Start/Stop 63
Bypassing, refer to Jump-
starting 218
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, care 226
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 133
Camera, Side View 136
Camera, Top View 137
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 161
Car battery 214
Car care products 224
Care, displays 226
Care, vehicle 224
Cargo 169
Cargo area, enlarging 157
Cargo area lid 40
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 162
Cargo, securing 170
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 170
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 34
Carpet, care 226
Car wash 223
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 167
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 204
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center armrest 160
Center console 16
Center-Lock, see button for
central locking 37
Central locking system 37
Central screen, refer to Con‐
trol Display 18
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 206
Changing wheels 214
Changing wheels/tires 195
Check Control 78
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 200
Children, seating position 59
Children, transporting
safely 59
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 59
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 60
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 59
Child safety locks 62
Child seat, mounting 59
Child seats 59
Chrome parts, care 225
Cigarette lighter 155
Cleaning, displays 226
Climate control 144, 146
Clock 81
Closing/opening from in‐
side 40
Closing/opening via door
lock 39
Closing/opening with remote
control 38
Clothes hooks 161
Coasting 176
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 176
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 176
Cockpit 14
Cold starting, refer to Starting
the engine 64
Collision warning with braking
function 108
Collision warning with City
Braking function 105
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 68
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 68
Comfort Access 41
COMFORT program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 119
Compartments in the
doors 160
Compass 153
Computer 86
Condensation on win‐
dows 148
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 168
Condition Based Service
CBS 204
Configuring drive pro‐
gram 119
Confirmation signal 43
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Connecting electrical devi‐
ces 155
Seite 235
Everything from A to Z Reference
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 88
Controller 18, 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 116
Convenient opening 38
Coolant 203
Coolant temperature 81
Cooling function 145, 147
Cooling, maximum 147
Cooling system 203
Corrosion on brake discs 168
Cruise control 128
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 121
Cruising range 81
Cupholder 161
Current fuel consumption 82
D
Damage, tires 195
Damping control, dy‐
namic 117
Data, technical 230
Date 81
Daytime running lights 92
Defrosting, refer to defrosting
the windows 145
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 148
Defrosting the windows 145
Dehumidifying, air 145, 147
Destination distance 87
Diesel exhaust fluid, at low
temperatures 184
Diesel exhaust fluid, having
refilled 184
Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐
mum 184
Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐
ishing yourself 184
Diesel particulate filter 167
Digital clock 81
Digital compass 153
Dimensions 230
Dimmable exterior mirrors 57
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 58
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 68
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 77
Display in windshield 89
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 94
Displays 75
Displays, cleaning 226
Disposal, coolant 203
Disposal, vehicle battery 215
Distance control, refer to
PDC 130
Distance to destination 87
Divided screen view, split
screen 24
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 34
Drive-off assistant 120
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 116
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 104
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 104
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 118
Driving instructions, breaking
in 166
Driving mode 118
Driving notes, general 166
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 116
Driving style analysis 177
Driving tips 166
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 116
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 117
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 117
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 116
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 117
E
ECO PRO 173
ECO PRO, bonus range 174
ECO PRO display 173
ECO PRO driving mode 173
ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis 177
ECO PRO mode 173
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
struction 175
EfficientDynamics 175
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 77
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 116
Emergency detection, remote
control 35
Emergency release, door
lock 40
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 180
Emergency Request 217
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 218
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 35
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 41
Energy Control 82
Energy recovery 82
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 65
Engine, automatic switch-
off 65
Engine compartment 198
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 199
Engine coolant 203
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 176
Engine oil 200
Engine oil, adding 201
Seite 236
Reference Everything from A to Z
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Engine oil additives 201
Engine oil change 202
Engine oil filler neck 201
Engine oil temperature 80
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 202
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 202
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 35
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 218
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 64
Engine stop 65
Engine temperature 80
Entering a car wash 223
Equipment, interior 151
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 116
Exchanging wheels/tires 195
Exhaust system 167
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 57
Exterior mirrors 56
External start 218
External temperature dis‐
play 81
External temperature warn‐
ing 81
Eyes for securing cargo 170
F
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 78
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 45
Fan, refer to Air
flow 145, 148
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 78
Filler neck for engine oil 201
Fine wood, care 225
First aid kit 218
Fitting for towing, refer to
Tow fitting 221
Flat tire, changing
wheels 214
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 102
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 99
Flat tire, warning
lamp 100, 103
Flooding 167
Floor carpet, care 226
Floor mats, care 226
Fogged up windows 145
Fold down the rear seat back‐
rest, see Though-loading
system 157
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 70
Foot brake 167
Front airbags 96
Front fog lamps 94
Front fog lamps, front, bulb
replacement 211
Front lamps 207
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 98
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 98
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 102
Fuel 182
Fuel cap 180
Fuel consumption, current 82
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 86
Fuel filler flap 180
Fuel gauge 80
Fuel quality 182
Fuel recommendation 182
Fuel, tank capacity 233
Fuse 215
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Universal garage door
opener 151
Gasoline 182
Gasoline quality 182
Gear change, automatic
transmission 72
Gear shift indicator 83
General driving notes 166
Glass sunroof, powered 47
Glove compartment 159
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 230
H
Handbrake, refer to parking
brake 67
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 152
Hazard warning flashers 217
Head airbags 96
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 92
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 91
Headlamp flasher 68
Headlamp glass 207
Headlamps 207
Headlamps, care 224
Headlamp washer system 68
Headliner 17
Head restraints 49
Head restraints, front 53
Head restraints, rear 54
Head-up Display 89
Head-up Display, care 226
Heavy cargo, stowing 170
High-beam Assistant 93
High beams 68
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 93
Hills 168
Seite 237
Everything from A to Z Reference
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 120
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 161
Homepage 6
Hood 199
Horn 14
Hotel function, trunk lid 41
Hot exhaust system 167
HUD Head-up Display 89
Hydroplaning 167
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 81
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 81
Identification marks, tires 193
Identification number, refer to
Important features in the en‐
gine compartment 198
iDrive 18
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 34
Ignition off 63
Ignition on 63
Indication of a flat
tire 100, 103
Indicator and warning
lamps 78
Individual air distribu‐
tion 145, 148
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 35
Inflation pressure, tires 187
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 102
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 86
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 100
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 103
Instrument cluster 75
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 77
Instrument lighting 94
Integrated key 34
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 217
Intelligent Safety 104
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 147
Interior equipment 151
Interior lamps 94
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 38
Interior motion sensor 45
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 58
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 153
Interior rearview mirror, man‐
ually dimmable 58
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 82
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 214
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 72
Jump-starting 218
K
Key/remote control 34
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 41
Key Memory, refer to Per‐
sonal Profile 35
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 72
Knee airbag 96
L
Lamp replacement 206
Lamp replacement, front 207
Lamp replacement, rear 212
Lamps 91
Lamps and bulbs 206
Lane departure warning 112
Lane margin, warning 112
Language on Control Dis‐
play 88
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 170
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 60
Launch Control 74
Leather, care 224
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 207
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
Light alloy wheels, care 225
Light control 92
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 207
Lighter 155
Lighting 91
Lighting via remote con‐
trol 38
Light switch 91
Load 170
Loading 169
Lock, door 39
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 40
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 39
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 38
Locking, automatic 43
Locking, central 37
Locking, settings 43
Lock, power window 46
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 62
Low beams 91
Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 93
Lower back support 51
Seite 238
Reference Everything from A to Z
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Low-Sulfur Diesel 183
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 171
Lumbar support 51
M
Maintenance 204
Maintenance require‐
ments 204
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 82
Maintenance system,
BMW 204
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 78
Manual air distribu‐
tion 145, 148
Manual air flow 145, 148
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 73
Manual operation, door
lock 40
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 57
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 180
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 131
Manual operation, rearview
camera 133
Manual operation, Side
View 136
Manual operation, Top
View 137
Manual transmission 71
Marking on approved
tires 196
Marking, run-flat tires 197
Master key, refer to Remote
control 34
Maximum cooling 147
Maximum speed, display 83
Maximum speed, winter
tires 196
Measure, units of 89
Medical kit 218
Memory, seat, mirror 55
Menu, EfficientDynamics 175
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 85
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 20
Messages, refer to Check
Control 78
Microfilter 146, 149
Minimum tread, tires 195
Mirror 56
Mirror memory 55
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 167
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlamp 207
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 59
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 53
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 54
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 225
New wheels and tires 195
No Passing Information 83
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 221
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 204
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 204
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 134
Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
line quality 182
Odometer 81
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Oil 200
Oil, adding 201
Oil additives 201
Oil change 202
Oil change interval, service
requirements 82
Oil filler neck 201
Oil types, alternative 202
Oil types, approved 202
Old batteries, disposal 215
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 206
Opening and closing 34
Opening and closing, from in‐
side 40
Opening and closing via door
lock 39
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 38
Opening the trunk lid with no-
touch activation 42
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Auto‐
matic recirculated-air con‐
trol 148
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 81
P
Paint, vehicle 224
Parallel parking assistant 138
Seite 239
Everything from A to Z Reference
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Park Distance Control
PDC 130
Parked-car ventilation 149
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 168
Parking aid, refer to PDC 130
Parking assistant 138
Parking brake 67
Parking lamps 91
Particulate filter 167
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 57
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 134
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 130
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function 110
Personal Profile 35
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 48
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 46
Plastic, care 225
Power failure 215
Power sunroof, glass 47
Power windows 45
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 187
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 102
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 35
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 48
Protective function, win‐
dows 46
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 18, 19
R
Radiator fluid 203
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 34
Radio ready state 64
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 69
Rear lamps 212
Rear socket 156
Rearview camera 133
Rearview mirror 56
Rear window de‐
froster 145, 148
Recirculated-air filter 149
Recirculated-air
mode 145, 148
Recommended tire
brands 196
Refueling 180
Remaining range 81
Remote control/key 34
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 39
Remote control, univer‐
sal 151
Replacement fuse 215
Replacing parts 206
Replacing wheels/tires 195
Reporting safety defects 9
RES button 124
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 81
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 100
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 170
Retreaded tires 196
Roadside parking lamps 92
Roller sunblinds 47
RON gasoline quality 182
Roof load capacity 230
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 171
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 221
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, refer to Run-flat
tires 197
Rubber components,
care 225
Run-flat tires 197
S
Safe braking 167
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 53
Safety belts 52
Safety belts, care 225
Safety switch, windows 46
Safety systems, airbags 96
Saving fuel 172
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver 206
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 222
Seat and mirror memory 55
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 52
Seat heating, front 52
Seat heating, rear 52
Seating position for chil‐
dren 59
Seats 49
Selection list in instrument
cluster 85
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 72
Sensors, care 226
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 204
Service requirements, dis‐
play 82
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 218
Services, ConnectedDrive
Seite 240
Reference Everything from A to Z
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 43
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 88
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 55
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 71
Shifting, manual transmis‐
sion 71
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 73
Side airbags 96
Side View 135
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 43
Sitting safely 49
Size 230
Slide/tilt glass roof 47
Snow chains 197
Socket 155
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 204
Soot particulate filter 167
SOS button 217
Spare fuse 215
Specified engine oil
types 202
Speed, average 86
Speed limit detection, on‐
board computer 87
Speed limiter, display 83
Speed Limit Information 83
Speed limit in the com‐
puter 87
Split screen 24
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
Driving Control 118
Sport automatic transmis‐
sion 73
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 87
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 118
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 73
Sport steering, variable 118
Stability control systems 116
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 65
Start/Stop button 63
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 35
Starting the engine 64
Status display, tires 99
Status information, iDrive 23
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering wheel, adjusting 58
Steering wheel heating 58
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 71
Stopping the engine 65
Storage compartment in the
rear 161
Storage compartments 159
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 159
Storage, tires 196
Storing the vehicle 226
Summer tires, tread 194
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 79
Surround View 132
Switch for Dynamic Driv‐
ing 118
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 150
Switch, refer to Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23
T
Tachometer 80
Tailgate 40
Tailgate opening with no-
touch activation 42
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 38
Tail lamps 212
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 230
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 145, 147
Temperature display, external
temperature 81
Temperature, engine oil 80
Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 121
Terminal, starting aid 219
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 79
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 44
Theft protection, refer to
Central locking system 37
Thigh support 51
Through-loading system 157
Tilt alarm sensor 45
Time of arrival 87
Tire damage 195
Tire identification marks 193
Tire inflation pressure 187
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, refer to FTM 102
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 99
Tires, changing 195
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 187
Tires, run-flat tires 197
Tire tread 194
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tools 206
Top View 136
Total vehicle weight 230
Touchpad 21
Tow fitting 221
Towing 220
Tow-starting 220
Seite 241
Everything from A to Z Reference
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
Tow truck 221
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 99
Traction control 117
TRACTION program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 117
Transmission, automatic 71
Transmission, manual 71
Transporting children
safely 59
Tread, tires 194
Trip computer 87
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 68
Trip odometer 81
Truck for tow-starting/
towing 221
Trunk lid 40
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Trunk lid, hotel function 41
Trunk lid opening with no-
touch activation 42
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 38
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 134
Turn signals, operation 68
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 212
U
Unintentional alarm 45
Units of measure 89
Universal remote control 151
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 72
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 40
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 39
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 38
Unlocking, settings 43
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 6
Upholstery care 225
USB interface 156
V
Variable sport steering 118
Vehicle battery 214
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 215
Vehicle, breaking in 166
Vehicle care 224
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification num‐
ber in the engine compart‐
ment 198
Vehicle jack 214
Vehicle paint 224
Vehicle storage 226
Vehicle wash 223
Ventilation 149
Ventilation, refer to Parked-
car ventilation 149
Voice activation system 26
W
Warning indicators 78
Warning lamps 78
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 78
Warning triangle 218
Washer fluid 70
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 70
Washer system 68
Washing, vehicle 223
Water on roads 167
Weights 230
Welcome lamps 91
Wheel cleaner 225
Wheels, changing 195
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 187
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 102
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 99
Window defroster,
rear 145, 148
Windows, powered 45
Windshield washer fluid 70
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 70
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 68
Windshield wiper 68
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 70
Winter diesel 183
Winter storage, care 226
Winter tires, suitable
tires 196
Winter tires, tread 194
Wiper blades, replacing 206
Wiper fluid 70
Wiper system 68
Wood, care 225
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Wrench 206
X
xDrive 117
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 210
Seite 242
Reference Everything from A to Z
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 926 810 ue
*BL292681000Y*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13
7

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN - 2013 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN - 2013 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,44 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info